Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . Finally.

2 .

and plumbing fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add more detailed modelling elements. Add basic MEP elements. such as mechanical equipment. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. and piping. electrical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. fixtures. electrical panels. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.

Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. However. On the Contents tab. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can choose to save your work. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. So. views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. and tags. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you open a training file. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. templates. Create schedules. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. such as templates and families. when you add ductwork. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Contact your CAD manager for more information. you learn where the training files are located. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. however.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. When you install the training files as instructed. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Metric file names have an _m suffix. your Training folder may be in a different location. and sheets to document the project. For example. In this exercise. annotations. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . These elements enhance the exercises you complete. For example. as well as how to open and save them. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. NOTE Depending on your installation. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create detail views. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. After completing each exercise. You do not design entire systems. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training.

scroll down.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For example. verify that Project Files (*.rvt and make changes.rvt. 8 If you have made changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt) is selected. For File name. 3 In the right pane. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you are prompted to save the changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the Training Files icon. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. click ➤ Save As. and click Save. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. double-click Imperial or Metric. enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For Files of type. and you can open any supported file type. the Open dialog displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 4 Click the training file name. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Open. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.

6 .

What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. hence. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If the length of the elevation is changed. the parameter is one of association or connection. and plans. You learn the terminology. If you move the partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the hierarchy of elements. In the Revit MEP model. the floor or roof remains connected. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and phases when you need it. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. every drawing sheet. and schedules required for a building project. drawing sheets. the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In this case. scope. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. quantities. drawings. schedules. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . the door retains this relationship to the partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. sections. 2D and 3D view. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project.

Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They display in relevant views of the design. When you change something. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tags. For example. boilers. boilers. For example. For example. sprinklers. Datum elements help to define project context. ducts. levels. and reference planes are datum elements. ducts. grids. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sinks. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels. sinks. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. dimensions. filled regions. walls and ceilings are hosts. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. tags. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.

programming is not required. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . schedules. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. North . By using a single project file. Project: In Revit MEP. and types. top of wall. For example. or bottom of foundation. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. This information includes components used to design the model. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. first floor. However. from geometry to construction data. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. In other cases. The project file contains all information for the building design. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. To place levels. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Most often. such as roofs.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. section views. families. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. for example. views of the project. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Often. and so forth). categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. floors. and drawings of the design. you can explicitly control them. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.

A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. showing. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. identical use. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A type can be a specific size of a family. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. hiding. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. A type can also be a style. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. System families include ducts. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . each in-place family contains only a single type. With a few clicks. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. or layer the views to see only the one on top. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. However. and wires. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Unlike system and standard component families. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Then experiment with them. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and similar graphical representation.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. pipes. You can also display several project views at one time. System families can be transferred between projects. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as a A0 title block. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Type: Each family can have several types.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

and settings. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. project and system parameters. and CAD files. architect-specific tools. and for switching views. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for editing existing elements. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. data and systems. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.. then select what you want to modify.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. displays frequently used tools. provides access to common tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. provides requested information.

such as Export and Publish. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Export) On the application menu.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Save As) export the current drawing. click. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing. select a file to open.

and Walkthrough. saves a current project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Publish) print the current drawing. To enable or disable a tool item. (Print) access product and license information. or template file.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. (Licensing) close the file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. but is not enabled by default. family.On the application menu.. Camera. to. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. family.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. publish the current project.

or the Family Editor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Clear the Status Bar check mark. when you switch to another editing mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Modify. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Group. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. displaying the same information. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. To hide the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. repeat the command. In addition. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. workshared components. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. However. When you are using a command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clipboard. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Starting with the most recent command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To show the Status Bar again. check the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. This displays the command history in a list.

for example. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. Place a Wall. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.

Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

In the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 To display SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. To modify or add snap increments. Modifying the View | 19 . on the Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 6 Click in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click . the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. As you move the mouse. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. Click and drag to orbit the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. and click tin the Options dialog. moving the wheel to the desired location. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 14 To exit the wheel. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.HVAC Plan .Design. and select the duct. Small blue dots. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. These are the drag controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. called drag controls. referred to as shape handles. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. bottoms. as shown. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. display along the ends. Similar controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Enter ZR. and open Level 2 . Performing Common Tasks | 21 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position.Some commands. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the duct. such as Move and Copy. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice.Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. such as the Modify Ducts command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Select Mechanical . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. For example. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

2 In the New Project dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. New projects inherit all the families. select Project. and open Metric ➤ Templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. In that case. system families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. link files. such as the default project units and settings. and loadable families. you learn how to start a project from a template. Finally. under Template file. and open North. such as coordination review and interference checking. create and manage views. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . settings. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Training files. under Create new. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 7 In the Project Browser. use copy/monitor. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 6 Click OK. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You can either select a template from the template library. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. and geometry from the starting template. the default building levels and standard views.rte template.

you can select it now. ■ For Building Construction. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. navigate to Metric Templates. NH. Click OK twice. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. When you select the material. review the construction materials listed. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 10 Using the same method. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . To maintain office standards and reduce rework. (Browse). you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. For Location. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. In the Choose Template dialog. under Energy Analysis. for Energy Data. create another new project using the Construction template. select School or University. click Browse. Click Cancel. For example. ■ ■ Under Create new. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Project template. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Edit. select Manchester. for City. Click OK.rte template and click Open. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Level 1. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.8 In the drawing area.

00 mm. 23 In the left pane.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and demand factors for electrical systems. and fire protection systems.00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization. power distribution systems. for 90.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. Click OK twice. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 110. Holding CTRL. for 20. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 27 Click OK. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Wiring. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and 140. 110. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. For Categories. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Views. under Duct Settings. 24 In the right pane.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 290. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 310. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing.00 mm. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.000 mm. select Identity Data. 140. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. piping.00 mm. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 90.00 mm. wiring. 26 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. click Rectangular. 33 Click OK. click Round. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Pipe Settings. under Duct Settings.00 mm. 260.00 mm.

select Associated Level.Origin to Origin. select Sub-Discipline. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Then by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. and groups that are contained in a project. To enable this coordination. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training. 5 Click OK. families. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. select View Name. For Then by.rvt.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select Auto . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Browse. select Family and Type. In addition. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. under Template file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 38 Close the file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. From the Positioning list. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Type/Discipline and click Edit. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. For Sort by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Click Open. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. sheets. Linking Projects In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.

Linking Projects | 31 . 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. under Constraints. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Room Bounding. select the linked architectural model. 12 Click OK. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 8 If necessary. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.Mech.

23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 19 On the left side of the view. click the level line for 03. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.Floor.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. click Plan View types. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.

click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. for the link file. Linking Projects | 33 . click By Host View. 27 In the drawing area. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. click Custom. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. appears above the copied elements. After copying. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. If you modify a monitored element. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 34 On the Basics tab. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. warnings notify you of any violations. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. level 3. highlight the linked model. indicating that a relationship is established. and click to select the linked model. select Custom. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. and the level 4. and that the copied elements are monitored. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. indicating that an element has changed. a warning message displays. 29 In the drawing area.

Click OK. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. under View Properties. 3 In the View templates dialog. click Custom. 36 Click OK. for the link file. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Select Show categories from all disciplines. for Name. you create a view template and apply it to your project template.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. deselect Levels. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Planting. Under Visibility. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Site. 5 On the Basics tab. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. select Custom. and Topography. deselect Parking. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. click Edit. 7 Click OK twice. Roads. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. click Custom. Under Visibility. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Click OK.

under Template file. Notice that the drawing area is black. under View Templates. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click the Graphics tab. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 5 In the New Project dialog. select Invert background color. 9 In the Options dialog. journal cleanup options. they are not saved to project files or template files. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. notification preferences. 3 Under Colors. 2 In the Options dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click the Graphics tab. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. selection default options. click Training Files.rte. 7 Click OK.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and your username when using worksharing. select Mechanical and click OK. click Browse.

These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. you specify default file locations. the elements causing the error display using this color. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 19 Press ESC to end the command. click the File Locations tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 17 Press ESC to end the command. family template files. 18 Select the wall. select None. 14 Click OK. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. select yellow. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. including your default project template.10 Under Colors. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and click OK. select One hour. 2 In the Options dialog. click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog. For Tooltip assistance. 13 Under Notifications. 21 Close the file without saving it. and family libraries. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 12 Click the General tab. However. When an error occurs.

you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. note the list of library names. saving. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. However. click Browse. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Load. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. In the following illustration. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. such as in a large. 5 Under Default path for user files. Save. and you can create new libraries. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and click Open. centralized. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 10 In the Places dialog. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. or loading a Revit MEP file. click Places. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 8 Click Cancel. 4 Click Cancel. You can modify the existing library names and path. and Import dialogs. Click and click Browse to select a template. you can start a new project with that template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Specifying File Locations | 37 . ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. click Browse. When you are opening. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 7 In the Options dialog.3 Under Default template file. This path is set automatically during the installation process.

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click (Add Value). 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click the My Library icon. Save. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ➤ Open. and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. and click (Browse). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and change the name to My Library. click My Library. templates. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 15 Under Library Name. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open.11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. and select it as the library path. Load.

and decal image files. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 5 In the text editor. such as bump maps. 20 Click ➤ Options. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click Edit. If you work in a large office. view the current path. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 19 Click Cancel. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click Places. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click OK. click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 11 In the Options dialog. 22 Select My Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 21 On the File Locations tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 27 Click OK. specify the new location here. 3 Under Settings. This path is determined during installation. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. If you want to relocate this path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. custom color files.

18 Click ➤ Options. you modify snap increments. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. click Close. 23 In the text editor. click Restore Defaults. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.. 22 In the text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Training Files. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap settings. 24 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Browse. and enter 500 . This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Edit.17 In the Spelling dialog. 20 Under Settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click File menu ➤ Save. As you zoom in and out within a view. 21 Under Personal dictionary.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 25 Close the file without saving it. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click the Spelling tab. click OK. click OK.

7 Under Object Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . zoom out until it does so. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. click OK. For example. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If you do not have a wheel button. deselect Chain. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter SM. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. While sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings.

19 Enter SM. and delete the value 500 . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click OK. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and the wall edges. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 26 Close the file. it will snap to the endpoints. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.. and move the cursor to the right. 22 Move the cursor downward. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

In this lesson. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. At the end of the tutorial. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. After finishing each exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. However. you will understand the process. 45 . As you create the mechanical system. and then you create a plenum level. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. water source heat pump (WSHP). After applying a color scheme to the zones. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you first plan the system. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow. In this exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you first configure the linked architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. duct system and a hydronic piping system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This system consists of a cooling tower. you can choose to save your work. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you design a mechanical system for an office building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory.

under Constraints.Space Plan is highlighted. and after the linked model highlights. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and double-click West . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.rvt. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. NOTE When working with a linked file. 6 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. In this section. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.MEP. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. These components are defined in the architectural training file. not in the MEP training file. ceilings. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. click to select it. roof. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. click Training Files. you add a level for plenums. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. select Room Bounding. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. and click Properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). The new level is placed. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 2600mm. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Click Plan View Types. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 9 On the Draw panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).

They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select Design. you can choose to save your work. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Under Extents. you place spaces in areas of the building model. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. For View Classification. enter 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for View Range. ■ Click OK twice. enter an Offset of 300mm. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the next exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. click Edit. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Plenum Plan. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for Level. select Level Above (Level 3). right-click Level 2 Plenum. However.Plenum. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Scale. Under Identity Data. and then place spaces in various types of areas. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In this exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. select MEP . you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. for Default View Template. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. For Sub-Discipline. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Top. and for Offset. In this exercise.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For Cut plane.

For Offset. select Horizontal. and ceilings). For Space. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select New. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Placing Spaces | 49 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. walls.Space Plan is highlighted. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For (Tag Location). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. For Upper Limit. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ensuring coordination between the files. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.7 Click to place the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter 219. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter Library. 14 In the drawing area. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

select Level 3. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Placing Spaces | 51 . 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. For Offset. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter 0. and then click Modify.

you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

enter 0. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Level 3. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. and then press Esc. for Upper Limit. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and for Offset. click Training Files. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule. and select Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. and change the space number to 216A. 10 Click in the number column. 9 In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

as shown. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 15 Press Esc twice. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 11 Close the schedule view.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. right-click. click in the chase area to place the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. and then click OK. select Interior and Reference. For Offset. enter 0. and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 10 In the plan view. 6 Enter VG.4 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. expand Spaces. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. select Roof Level. select Level 3. In the plan view.

18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Loaded Tags. All spaces in the view are tagged. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and click OK. 15 Press Esc. For Number. floors. Under Identity Data. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and maximize the view. Bounding elements (such as walls. ceilings. enter 1200. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. enter 225PC. enter Chase.Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . for Name.■ For Limit Offset. 17 Type ZF.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After a space is placed in an area. In this exercise. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. which removes the space from the Default zone.20 Close the file with or without saving it. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click Training Files. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click View ➤ Zones.Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. In the next exercises. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

The graphic in the System Browser updates. click Training Files. and verify the zones in the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that the space is occupiable.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. click Reference. select Occupiable. under Energy Analysis. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. As you do this. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. double-click 121 Cafeteria. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The Zone tool is active. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. under Spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you assign spaces to a zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and a new zone is created. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. ) or 5 In the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.

you can add or remove a space from the zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Instruction. select Computer Lab 222. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Electrical 220 spaces. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Click OK. type VG. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 4 In the drawing area. To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 5 With the drawing area active. Expand HVAC Zones. and click Finish Editing Zone.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction 221. select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Using the Edit Zone tab. and modify the zone properties. you need to activate the zone visibility. In the System Browser.

under Spaces. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning view to activate it.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verify the zone in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .West . for Name. under Identity Data. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. expand 2 . To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 10 On the Edit Zone tab. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 9 In the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. click Reference. and click OK.Area B. enter 2 . 5 Click in the Level 1 .rvt.West . In this exercise. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Finish Editing Zone.

8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 15 Press Esc. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. click in the Level 2 . zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Select Attached End.Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.

click the corner where the Top. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. on the ViewCube. for Name Value. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Wireframe is selected. click Training Files. space. double-click the zone tag. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.Zoning to make it the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. you verify the building.Zoning view. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and zone information. double-click Level 1 .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Front. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.East. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and select 109 Lounge. enter Lounge . and click OK. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.

All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Click (Highlight). ■ ■ On the Details tab. you isolate the space. select 1_South_Area C. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click (Isolate). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Next.

For Cooling Information. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads. and air changes per hour. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that 21.33 °C : 12. cooling air temperature. the zone information displays for the selected zone. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. outdoor air per area. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. click . and then click OK.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and humidification set point. For Heating Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. the space information displays for the selected space. select 109 Lounge. For Construction Type. Next. and in the People dialog. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Building> is selected.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.22 °C : N/A is specified. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Below the list of spaces and zones. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Next. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. click . click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. heating air temperature. and then click OK.11 °C : 32. verify that 23. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the cooling set point. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. click . and dehumidification set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Next. select Lounge/Recreation.

17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and other room-bounding components. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. floors. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. roofs. click Cancel. select Level 3. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. open MEP . and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 0. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Offset.

you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. enter 212P. and zone information. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Under Energy Analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verified building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Click OK. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that the space has replaced the void. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and select space Plenum 212P. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. For Name. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. for Number.

rvt. For Building Construction. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click Edit. and click Element Properties. under Energy Analysis. click Training Files. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. verify that <Building> is specified. For Ground Plane. verify that New Construction is selected. click in the Value field.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Volume Computations. you need to select this option. For Export Complexity. select space Library 219. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.Space Plan. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. On the Place tab. 8 In the drawing area. verify that Manchester. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. enter 03101. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Postal Code. for City. For Location. On the Weather tab. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and click OK. select School or University. is selected. and click OK. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that 300 is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Project Phase. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . right-click. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. for Building Service. In order to select a space. for Energy Data. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click OK twice. If. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. NH. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. double-click Level 2 .

select Heated and cooled. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. click Edit. for Values. Click OK. m. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Specified. Next. enter 60 W. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Occupiable is selected. click Edit. and click OK. and enter 15 sq. a cooling load. Under Power. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. select Actual. For Building Construction. and then click . For Condition Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Service. verify that School or University is selected. For Space Type. For Sensible. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You have verified the building information. select Actual. For People. both. for Values. select Library . Select Area per person. verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. or neither. for Values. select Specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that <Building> is specified. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . NH. click in the Value column. 12 Click the Details tab. For Latent. Select the space associated with the warning. enter 45 W. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Location.Audio Visual. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). is specified. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values.

A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You should correct the space error in the building model. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 19 In the drawing area. space. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. 21 Click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. or zone information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 17 In the loads report. and can be modified here. select 219 Library. and a loads report displays. select 219 Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and zone information for the building model. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. There should be no warnings displayed. In this exercise.11°C. click Calculate. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and click OK. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click Information). weather. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. space. and under Heating Information. 15 Review the loads report for project.Space Plan. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. or make any changes to the model. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.

click Training Files. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.rvt. select HVAC Zones. Click OK.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Color Scheme. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. 3 In the drawing area. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. in relatively small increments. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. under Schemes. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Cooling Load . and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view.Expanded Ranges. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color scheme legend.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. click Training Files. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. In the next exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 11 Using the method learned previously.

add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and then click . select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Air Flow. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Calculated Value dialog. For Formula. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Schedule Properties dialog.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Discipline. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. more category options are available. select HVAC. Select Schedule building components. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. enter Airflow Delta. Select Formula. For Type. select Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. click (Browse). Under Available fields. ■ Click Calculated Value. select New Construction. for Select available fields from.Space Fill is the active view. For Name. Click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Space Airflow Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. for Formula. Click OK. enter . select Spaces.

■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Number. select Not Between. select Airflow Delta. In the Color dialog. Select Ascending. Header. select red. and then select Hidden field. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. select Level. a view opens that contains the selected space. click the color swatch. and Blank line. For Fields. right-click to access schedule properties. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then click Conditional Format. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. For Then by. Click OK twice. For Background Color.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. verify that Show is highlighted. For Value. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays. Under Conditions to Use. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.

you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In the next lesson. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise.

In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Then. After system creation. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will create supply air systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.

HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. the space crossing lines display.rvt. and scroll to space 223. click Training Files. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. click Place on Face. the hosted elements are updated as well. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. enter 215 L/s. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Also. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. as shown. and press Enter. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. type 3600. select the diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 9 On the Placement panel.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and then press Esc to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 17 Move the cursor down. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and then select both Copy and Multiple. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

25 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select one of the diffusers. Next. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. clear Leader. 28 On the Placement tab. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 22 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. As you place the return diffusers. and click Open. click Place on Face.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . and then press Esc.rfa. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.

under Other. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. for Reference. 32 In the Project Browser.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select Strong Reference. and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines. Level. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select the vertical grid line as shown. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. and then press Esc twice. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 43 Using the same method. 40 In the drawing area. align the other return diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

clear LeftArrow. 47 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and press Enter. select both return diffusers. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. and click Element Properties. right-click. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. under Mechanical. for Flow. As you place the air terminals. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 While pressing Ctrl. and click OK. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.

at the lower left corner of the building. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand HVAC . for Scale. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design to make it the active view. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .rvt. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click 1 : 100. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. select M_Supply Diffuser . click Training Files. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. and double-click Level 1 .200 Neck. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.

Click OK.Airflow. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. By copying the diffuser.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. for Offset. enter 2400. Under Mechanical . If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. for Flow. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. As a result. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. type 6000. enter 170 L/s. 15 Press Esc. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. move the cursor down. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. 11 Select the diffuser. Also. under Constraints. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . and then press Enter. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader.16 Using the same method. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. and then press Esc. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

under Other. and Flow. under Available Fields. and then right-click in the schedule. Next. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . select Mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. for Sort by. tile the windows. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. mark. 27 In the schedule. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. select Air Terminals. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). under space 115. double-click System Type. For Category. 25 Click OK 3 times. Mark. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. Type. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Using the method learned previously. 29 Using the same method. and click View Properties. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. enter 210 L/s. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. click Edit. it is a negative value. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and press Enter. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. for Flow. select 21.

The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design. and maximize Level 1 .HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. As you highlight the zone. 31 In the drawing area. as shown. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

7-18 kW .3 times the heating load). 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Horizontal .High Efficiency .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 36 In the drawing area. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.43 W (approximately 1. 35 In the Type Selector. 33 Click OK. and under Energy Analysis. select M_WSHP . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.

the space crossing lines display. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. In this exercise. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. However. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. After creating the logical connection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Keep the System Browser open. indicating that it’s the active view. for Constraints ➤ Offset.HVAC Plan . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. You then create the logical connection between the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Design is highlighted. including energy analysis.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter . right-click the title. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and click View ➤ Systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.rvt. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. and click OK. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 44 Zoom in to space 115. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. As you add diffusers to systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.

18 Click OK. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Connect Into. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and the system connects them. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the air terminals are the children. 11 In the drawing area. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Flow value. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 17 Using the method learned previously. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 15 Click Cancel. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. System Name. On the Options Bar. review the Number of Elements. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.

under Identity Data.rvt. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. for System Name. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK. 25 Click OK. for Mark. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Mechanical.Rename the system Next. which updates the name in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building.

Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). click Settings. For Offset. which provides various layout tools. enter 3000. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. and display solution 1. For Duct Type. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. In this case. select the upper left diffuser.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. Also. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . For Offset.Design is highlighted. Select Branch. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the Network type provides several solutions. A Generate Layout tab displays. When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Solution Type. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter 3000.HVAC Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Network. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Round. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

or offset elevations are incorrect. click Modify. 11 Click Finish Layout. Click OK. as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you’ll get an error in a later step. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as shown. or manually modify the duct. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 900. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example.

Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click OK. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click to select it. Usually. a disconnection exists. highlight a segment of the main duct. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. fittings. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . for Color Scheme. If the entire network does not highlight.

select one of the diffusers in the system. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 20 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. but not all values are used in this view. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . select the WSHP. under Graphics. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and press Enter. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and then click OK. for Values Displayed. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select By View. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Flow. and on the Options Bar.Airflow.

and then click to select it. select Calculated Size Only. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Select the upper segment of main duct. select Duct Color Fill . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Under Constraints. and drag it to the right. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 26 Click OK. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Select Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.65 Pa/m. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and enter . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 400. click Cancel. select Friction. for Schemes. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. highlight a segment of the duct.Velocity. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select Restrict Height. for Branch Sizing.

31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 33 Move the cursor over the system components. static pressure. pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The ductwork and fittings are updated. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. Using this tool. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. also known as the critical path. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. double-click MEP . Front.3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser. enter 3000. NOTE When drawing duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and click Draw Duct. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube. right-click the connector grip. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. for Offset. click the corner where the Top.

104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.

You can ignore the warning.22 Using the same method. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 30 Press Esc twice.

and then click OK. 40 Using the same method. and click to select it. under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Airflow. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. for Flow. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. under Mechanical . and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click OK. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.

108 .

109 . including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. and a cooling tower located on the roof. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you place mechanical equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.

as shown. in corridor 328.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files.Horizontal High Efficiency . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Left Return .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_WSHP . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.7-18kW .

8 Click the corridor wall face. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and enter 600. 10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. click the dimension.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Wall faces is selected. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .) 14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and in the Type Selector.

enter 0. as shown. 21 Click Modify. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.75 L/s. enter 2750. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Offset. Click OK.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Water Flow. Under Mechanical. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click to place it in the mechanical room. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). you create the return and supply piping systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can create pipes to connect system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components.

click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser. Assigning a system component to an existing system. In the System Browser. As you assign equipment to systems.Mech 330). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and click View ➤ Piping. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 2 WSHPs. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Creating a Piping System | 115 . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. while pressing Ctrl. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. where it is easier to review the information. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.rvt. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display indicates that the system is selected. right-click the Systems column heading. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.

17 On the Options Bar. for System Name. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. for System Name. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. select the boiler. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 10 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. You have created the hydronic return system. and the Edit System tool is not active. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 12 In the drawing area.

22 In the Select Connector dialog. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 . In cooling mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 23 Close the roof plan view.Design. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 25 Select the boiler. under Design ➤ HVAC . In heating mode. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.8. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). you can view several parameters. 28 Using the same method. enter 0. and click Properties. 29 Right-click CHWS. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. including the flow rate and size of the component. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Expand All. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Select. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. for Water Flow. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. expand the Hydronic Return system category.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. You also manually modify the layout path as required. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. expand Piping. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK.

then the Select a System dialog displays. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . you can place the cursor over a system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.rvt. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 5 In the Filter dialog. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and click to select it. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. When you draw a box to select components.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. select Mechanical Equipment. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. A system preview displays in red.

structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. select Perimeter. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. 11 On the Options Bar. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected.9 In the Select a System dialog. It does not reference the architecture. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 450. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. click Settings. 10 Click OK. duct. or architectural components. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select CHWR. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. to display the path with thinner lines. With each Tab. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 17 Optionally. 19 In the drawing area. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.75 L/s.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the flow for each WSHP is 0. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and press Tab 3 times.

23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.75 L/s).50 L/s. notice that the Water Flow is 1. and access its instance properties. and click OK.50 L/s. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

Logically. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. On the Options Bar. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design. click Edit System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. 28 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.

Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. as shown. under Mechanical. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. note that the value for Flow is 4. which propagates flow throughout the system.94 L/s.94 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Next.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. and click Cancel. access its instance properties. so the total flow of 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.44 L/s. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 38 Using the same method. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select a WSHP. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.00%. and then click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Slope. 40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 0. enter 450. 41 Click OK. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Inset. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 46 Click Modify.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.

Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. as shown. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . 50 Using the same method. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). or offset elevations are incorrect. To create the piping system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 51 Click Finish Layout. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.Design is highlighted. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. click Training Files. and the return pipes are magenta. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view.

9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. Click to specify the reference point.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. and the lower one is secondary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. select the boiler. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and click Draw Pipe. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).11 In the Select Connector dialog. The connections are automatically created. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.

■ Move the cursor down. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. for Offset. and you select 1 connector. enter 381. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 600.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter.

21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 19 In the plan view. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

as shown. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. you select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and select it. right-click the bottom connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. and when the connector point displays.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 29 If necessary. right-click the discharge connector.28 Press Esc. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 1200.

these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. enter 2850. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300.■ Move the cursor down.

37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system. Next.

40 Click Cancel. In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view.50 or 50% of the Flow. 42 Click OK. right-click. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. for Cooling Water Flow. 46 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. The flow is being propagated through the piping.44 L/s. view the properties for the secondary pump. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s). 43 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. select the cooling tower. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . which is rounded up to 3. notice that under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click OK. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. notice that Flow is 6. Connect the cooling tower Next. under Mechanical.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 48 In the plan view. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 41 Using the same method. When you create the pumps in parallel. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. right-click.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.44 L/s.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

the water bypasses the cooling tower. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . as shown.52 Close the file with or without saving it. and is heated by the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When the valve is open. indicating that it’s the active view. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).rvt. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.

Adding Valves | 145 . and select M_Ball Valve . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. The bypass valve is closed by default. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 6. and click Element Properties. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click OK. Adding Valves | 147 . 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click.

44 L/s. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Select the bypass valve. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.rvt. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. and select M_Ball Valve . In heating mode. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow is 6. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.44 L/s. Initially. 22 Using the method you just learned.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill . as shown. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. and click OK. and click OK.Flow. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.

or manually modify the pipe. select Friction. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And. and enter 220 Pa/m. Either relocate the system components. Click OK. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.5 m/s. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. for Branch Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or offset elevations are incorrect. Under Constraints. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 1. and for Velocity. select a different layout solution.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc.

and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Using the System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 151 . 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.Design ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D Building. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Inspecting the System In this exercise.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss. as shown. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number.

targeting those systems that need attention. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you need to validate them.Design. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 10 Click Finish. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the Static Pressure is 41916.7. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.0 L/s.HVAC Plan .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. for Fluid Temperature.rvt. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Warnings display.Note that the Flow is 1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. click Training Files. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.1 Pa. select 32° C. 9 Using the same method. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In this exercise. inspect Section 6 again.4 Pa. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and to size pipe.

Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. For example. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 10 Using the same methods. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 6 In the Project Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 9 Right-click CHWS. As you learned when placing components. and click Expand All. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 4 In the System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. the pipe is associated with that system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. TIP If you have multiple views open. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. If you place components without assigning them to a system. right-click Hydronic Return. and confirm unassigned system components. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. expand the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click Show to view all of the system components. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. otherwise. After you assign components to a system.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 12 In the System Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.HVAC Plan . click Close. right-click the Systems titlebar. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select Level 3 . and for pipe sizing.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. In the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and click View. After you have assigned all components to systems.Design floor plan. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan .

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .

select 90. For Factor. expand Wiring . enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. wiring. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. ■ ■ For Material. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. enter 1. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Temperature. select Wiring Types. click (Open). For Material. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . As you place components and create circuits. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training Files. distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. You also add a wiring type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you review electrical settings.rvt. enter 70.Wire Sizes. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. Click OK. and demand factors that are applied in the design. speeding up the design phase. select Copper.04. Select Correction Factor. select Copper.

For L-L Voltage. Click Split. select 75. For Neutral Multiplier. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Conduit Type. Select Neutral Required. select 10000 VA. select Hot Conductor Size. select 3. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 2000. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For L-G Voltage. For Wires. enter 50. By specifying a range. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Voltage Definitions. enter 1. select Demand Factors. For Maximum. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 240. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Phase. Under More Than. enter 250. select Single. For Max Size.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Minimum. For Insulation. enter 240. For Value. select 120. enter 120/240. select 240. Click OK. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.0. select Steel. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. enter 220. select Power. For Neutral Size. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Distribution Systems. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select THHN. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification.

5 In the drawing area. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. For Type of Parameter. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Later in the tutorial. In this case the key style is the type of space and. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Under Categories. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. select Electrical . The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. click (Open). For Group Parameter Under. such as offices. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Click OK twice. enter Required Lighting Level. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .rvt. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under the Electrical .Lighting Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting group in the space element properties. and conference rooms. Verify that Instance is selected. select Illuminance.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. select Electrical. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. select Spaces. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Discipline. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.Lighting. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. restrooms.

note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . under Electrical . 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. enter 485. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Lighting Levels.Lighting. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. under Available Fields. and for Key Name. double-click Required Lighting Level. and click OK. Select Schedule Keys. enter Open Office. enter Space Lighting Requirements. For Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.

click Edit. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. for Sorting/Grouping. which is mapped to project units. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. change the sort order back to the default setting.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK twice. 22 Using the same method. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Notice that as you enter the data. Select Blank Line.Lighting Plan. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select Required Lighting Level.

under Identity Data. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Later in this exercise. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. for Lighting Levels. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open). Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. select Instruction-Standard. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. In this exercise. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Click OK. the value input applies only to the selected space. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. ■ Click OK. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Duplicate). and press ENTER. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for 500 lx. click (Add Value) again. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. For Color. For example. and click (Add Value). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.00 lx. for Category. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.00 lx.00. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and in the At Least column. and press Enter. for Name.00 lx. 00 lx still selected. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter 800. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. select Spaces. select Required Lighting Level. enter 200. Under Schemes. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and click (Add Value) five times. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. Select the scheme for 450. and press ENTER.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Title. verify the By Range is selected. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.00. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. enter 900. click Training Files.rvt. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. select Required Lighting. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . enter Lighting Delta. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Click OK. 8 In the drawing area.Lighting CF. For Discipline. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Spaces. For Name. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Color Scheme. 13 Click Calculated Value. select Spaces. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click Number. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available Fields. Name. and Required Lighting Level. Average Estimated Illumination. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . For Type. select Illuminance. Level.

select Required Lighting Level. select Lighting Delta. select Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Not Between. Click OK. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Value. under Condition. click Browse. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Level. type a hyphen. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Fields. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click Conditional Format. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .■ For Formula. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Header. for Test. for Custom Colors. select Red. Click OK twice. for Formula. Select Blank Line. and click Browse. Click OK three times. for Sort by. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Click Background Color. press the spacebar.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

as you place lighting fixtures. power circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. 171 . you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

Lighting Ceiling plan. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. You can create additional color schemes.Lighting CF view is open. select Average Estimated Illumination. click (Open). then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 7 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . for the Spaces Category. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. In the Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.rvt. Under Scheme Definition. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . for Basic Colors. select Orange. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. Click OK.

indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 13 Click the Level 2 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.

5 fc range. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 19 Press ESC to end the command. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the fixtures will move accordingly. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277V. 20 Select the lighting fixture.the +/. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.5 fc range is satisfied. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

scroll to view space space Library 219.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. enter 162. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.00 VA. for Name enter and click OK. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Apparent Load. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the Select File dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select Luminous Flux. In the next exercise. you add switches. for Lamp. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and receptacles to your design. enter . enter F15. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. and Receptacles | 183 .93. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). select Xenon and click OK. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and click OK. junction boxes. click the value for Light Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000. ■ Click OK twice. for Ballast Loss Factor. Junction Boxes. click Training Files. ■ Click Apply. for Type Mark. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. select the top center fixture. 9 In space Library 219. Under Electrical. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click the value for Initial Intensity. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Junction Boxes. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select T5 [HO]. select 463T5_S. Under Photometrics.ies and click Open. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.85.rvt. Placing Switches. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.00 lm. enter . click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. The element type M_Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. Select M_Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. In the Type Properties dialog.Offset. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter JB-1NL. note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Under Electrical. zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click Edit Type. enter 2750. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Select the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. Click OK twice.

and Number of Elements. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. NOTE If necessary. Space Number. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Select Size. Space Name. Expand Electrical. Click OK. Junction Boxes. Distribution System. and Voltage. and Receptacles | 187 . Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Placing Switches. 26 In the System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Expand General. 24 For any column.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. Junction Boxes. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 .

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.

Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .208V MCB . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).Surface: 100A.equipment. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).

for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. for Max.Loads. Click OK. enter LP-2B. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter PP-2B.480V MCB . for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 8 Select the panelboard. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 7 Press ESC to end the command. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers.

select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 20 In the drawing area. and for Category. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 23 In the Filter dialog.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.

38 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

click Training Files. Next you create circuits without showing wire. for Hot Conductors. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221.39 Using the same method. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. click Check None. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 42 In the Filter dialog. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 2. and create permanent wiring.Loads. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. select Wires. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click (Open). Click OK. except without wire. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Distribution System. Rating. and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 13 In the System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and verify that Load. and Voltage Drop are selected. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Voltage. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Expand Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. change the Voltage to 277V. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 30 Close the System Browser. under Electrical. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click Tags. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

notice the label parameters and click Cancel. For Circuit Number. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. for Type Mark. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit Type. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. enter FR4. 35 Press ESC to end the command. select Break. 40 Click OK twice. click below the first one to place it. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. 47 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and click Apply. Click OK. Click Save. select Lighting Fixture Tags. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down.rvt. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.rfa. click Check None. and for Category. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. click Training Files. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 57 In the Filter dialog. click (Open). 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a switch system. Click OK. enter a comma. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File Name. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 52 In the Save As dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 54 Select all of the tags.

9 Select the occupancy sensor. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Click OK. under Electrical Lighting. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.

19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Click OK. click Check None. Creating Power Loads | 207 . under Electrical . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. lighting. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. and click Element Properties. 4 In the Filter dialog. select the PP-2B panel. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.Loads. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. enter 2. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Hot Conductors. Circuits are used for power. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 7 In space Electrical 220. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.rvt. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.26 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. and for Category. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Open. and click to select the circuit. and in the right pane. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.rfa. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wiring. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . click the connector of the first receptacle. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 26 Press Delete. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. 28 In the drawing area. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.

enter 30A. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 1-#10. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. select panel LP-2B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 6 Click OK. click Training Files. Under Electrical-Loads. Had there been a greater imbalance. 1-#12. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Rating.rvt. After re-balancing loads. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. zoom to space Electrical 220. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down. 2 In the drawing area. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. click Open. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. the distribution is shifted. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 1-#12.

click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.Loads.Loads. select the transformer TP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 25A. for Rating. under Electrical . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 40A. under Electrical . 24 Click Select Panel.

Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 4 mm. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. for Font. 4 Close the report. for Font Size. click Edit. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 10 Click OK twice. for Appearance. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Select PP-2B. 6 In the Project Browser. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Under Header Text. click (Open). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. click Training Files. under Other. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Under Body Text. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 5 In the Project Browser. and open E601 . NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. The Panel Schedule Report displays. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 5 mm. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Click OK. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. for Font Size.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Sheets (all). select Bold and Italic.

There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Open). click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.rvt. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select space Lounge 212. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. under Warnings. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. for Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Checking Your Design | 215 .12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

4 In the Name dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. click Training Files. Adding a pipe size. and click Properties. 219 .Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sanitary.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click PVC . In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. type PVC . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and verify that Level 1 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and click OK. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. in addition to loading existing families.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type. click Duplicate. In this exercise.rvt.

For Offset.Sch 40 .Vent is listed. for Material. enter 46. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 22 Click New Size. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 54. 21 In the right pane. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.rfa. 17 In the left pane. select Plastic. under Mechanical. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Tee. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Cross. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.293 mm. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 25 For Outside. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 6 Click OK. and click Main.DWV. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . enter 10°. click Modify. select Tee. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . click Pipe Settings. 27 For the new pipe size.000 mm. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 For System Type. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter -1250. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Sch 40 . select None. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Types. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.DWV: Standard. for Nominal. Tap. 15 For System Type.PVC . select Sanitary. In the Project Browser. select Sanitary. PVC .Sch 40 . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. enter 45. 10 On the Selection panel. and click OK. 13 In the right panel. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.006 mm.PVC . select Branch. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. click Training Files. select M_Tee Sanitary .

Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the cold water system. and hot and cold water piping. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 .

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. for example. a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK. The base is placed.

and click OK. select 100 mm. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Slope. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 1.05%. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -350 mm. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 28 On the Options Bar.Sanitary. The default settings are automatically modified.19 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. 21 On Options Bar. 30 Click Modify. enter -1225. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Main. and for Offset. 24 For Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 29 On the Options Bar.Sanitary. and click Settings. You accept this suggested solution. 26 For Pipe Type. and modify it to meet project requirements. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -350 mm. 23 For Pipe Type. click Solutions. 27 For Offset. select Intersections. select Branch. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 In the left pane. select PVC . select PVC . for Diameter. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method.

38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Overall. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. as shown.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown. under M_Lavatory . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open.Rectangular. select 560 mmx560 mm . click Training Files.Public.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel.

7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink.2. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. enter 711.

12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter 711.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create the third sink. 11 In the System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.2. click Add To System. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

20 Select the fitting. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. double-click 3D Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish Editing System. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall.16 On the Edit System panel.Design ➤ 3D Views. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view.

press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .22 In the plan view. and click to draw the pipe. with the tee fitting selected. for Offset. When you press the Spacebar. enter 1. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click Draw Pipe. 24 On the Options Bar.05%. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. enter 760 mm.

32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting. 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC .DWV.Sch 40 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard. 29 In the Type Selector.

right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 305 mm. for Offset. enter 150 mm. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. on the Options Bar.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view.

40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. 48 Click Modify.

53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector.DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. under M_Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 54 Click Modify.Sch 40 . select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. 55 In the 3D view.

and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left.. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify. enter 150 mm. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select a proposed solution. under Pipe Types. select PVC Sanitary. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. click Finish to select the recommended solution. as shown. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. Press Esc. In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

63 On the Slope Editor panel.05% is selected.rvt. adjusting the sanitary stack. for Slope. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. verify that 1.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and verify the slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 7 On the Selection panel. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.DWV.PVC . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 5 Select the tee. 9 In the Type Selector. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Design. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector.Design. as shown. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Standard. 10 In the 3D view. 3 In the Section view. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. click Modify.Overall. and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. select the vertical stack. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Floor level line. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You create a new pipe type. and click Duplicate. In this lesson. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. go to http://www. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. However.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. If the tutorial training files are not present. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 267 . click Training Files. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. In the left pane. select Carbon Steel. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and click Properties. duct. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 2800 is specified. For Offset. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and then click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you create project parameters and work with schedules. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Mechanical. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. However. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. or architectural components. select Main. for Material. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Offset. and enter Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. Next. 6 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 9 Click OK. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For System Type. In the next exercise.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Pipe Type. verify that 2800 is selected.

right-click. 5 Click OK twice. under Fire Protection. for Name.Design is highlighted. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Under Categories. 8 Using a crossing window. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Fire Protection. enter Sprinkler Zone. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Zone 1. select the upper half of the building. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Fire Protection Piping Plan . the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. For Group parameter under.rvt. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 6 In the drawing area. and then click OK.

to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then access instance properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. enter Zone 2. including a calculated value parameter. and then click OK. and then click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. for Sprinkler Zone. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog.rvt. click Training Files. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m.

Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 14 Select the new header.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Type of Parameter. For Units. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 11 Click OK twice. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Name. and click Field Format. select Length. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The schedule displays. 6 Using the same method. For Unit symbol. select Millimeters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click Add Parameter. Select Schedule keys. select mm. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 10 In the Format dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 7 Click OK. select 0 decimal places. click the Formatting tab. and on the ribbon. For Group parameter under. select Spaces. enter Maximum Spacing. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on each column separator. select Maximum Spacing. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Key name. enter Light. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. indicating that it’s the active view. Obstructed-Combustible. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. select Fire Protection. For Rounding. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.

Unobstructed Ordinary. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. enter 40. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 4575. and press Enter. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. For Name. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. select Spaces.

For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . click . For Formula. Click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Area. Enter the formula operator / after Area.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Common. and click Field Format. 22 Click OK twice. 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. For Type. under Available fields. select 0 decimal place. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Discipline. select Number. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Units. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. In the Fields dialog.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Number. select Grand totals. Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Then by. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. Under Field formatting. under Other. Select Header and Blank line. and then click Field Format. for Sort by. select Level.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and click View Properties. At the bottom of the dialog. and select Totals only. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 26 Click OK 3 times. ■ In the Format dialog. and then select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Sorting/Grouping. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance).

and click View Properties. 30 Click OK twice. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and click View Properties. for Filter.27 In the drawing area. select Count. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and Count. and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter by. select Grand totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. On the Formatting tab. for Available fields. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. right-click the schedule. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. System Name. delete the word Maximum. select Calculate totals. under Other. select Sprinklers. double-click Type.

As a result. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and access the instance properties. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. double-click FP . 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 41 In the plan view. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. and click OK. but their values are not determined. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 48 In the floor plan. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information.Fire Protection Plan Design. select Light. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. 279 . go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. As you create the system. you can choose to save your work.autodesk. and double-click Level 2 . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. methodology. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After finishing each exercise. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. As you place the sprinklers.

4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When this happens. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. After placing the initial sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 10 Press Esc twice. 206. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . select the sprinklers that you placed. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 11 In the drawing area. and 207. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.

Next. 17 In the Project Browser. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.Design. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Fire Protection Piping Plan . specify a vertical offset. and then press Esc. 200B. open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 16 Close the ceiling plan view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and 200C).

You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 25 Click OK. move the cursor to the right. 29 Press Esc. Next. enter 2900 mm. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you adjust the offset. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . This number is determined in the schedule. For Number. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.19 In the floor plan. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and press Enter.FP_Ceiling view. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. In the next exercise. and with piping (physical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. under Constraints. enter 11. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . After creating the logical connection. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. for Offset. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Notice that the schedule updates. In this exercise. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.0. enter 4100. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties.

IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click View ➤ Systems. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. However. 5 Right-click the header. Unlike logical connections (systems).Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.rvt. As you assign sprinklers to systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

indicating the logical connection. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. press Tab. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. In the System Browser. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. named Fire Protection Wet.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Next. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 11 With the system still selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. and select the system. place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Select. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 285 . within the Piping Systems folder. select an initial piping layout.

0 is specified. click Solutions.Wet is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. for Diameter. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that 2800. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select 150 mm. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Main is selected. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and on the Options Bar. select Branch. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and a piping layout preview displays. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 12 On the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. as shown. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). and number of elements in the system. 19 Click OK. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 14 Click Finish Editing System. When the layout is finished. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Pipe Type. In the left pane. 15 In the drawing area. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. system equipment. for System Name. The Generate Layout tools are activated. click Place Base. click Settings.The Edit Piping System panel displays. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 13 In the System Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. enter -3650. providing system editing tools. 23 For Offset.

The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and select solution 4. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Creating a Piping System | 287 . A (parallel movement control) displays. and green represents branch lines). the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. verify that Network is selected. On the Generate Layout panel. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. In general. click Modify.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type.

Either relocate the system components.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 29 Click Finish Layout. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. as shown. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .33 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and various manual pipe creation tools. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Piping Plan . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. 3 If necessary. the Connect Into tool.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

8 In the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. or a system component to display system tools. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Add To System. you can select the pipe or duct. 5 In the drawing area. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. click Finish Editing System. mechanical equipment. air terminals. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and pipe or duct is created. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 9 On the Edit System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).

20 Open Design ➤ FP . 18 Click Finish Editing System. 14 Close the System Browser.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. verify that Network is selected. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 13 Click Finish Layout. 23 View the result in the 3D view. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 5. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Solution Type. and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. select 2800. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. 28 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.

4 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 31 In the plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. select 1 : 50. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the whole system highlights. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. for Scale. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Design is highlighted. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

enter FP Section_Stair. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 10 In the Project Browser. drag the top section boundary line up. 22 In the drawing area.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and then right-click the top connector. 15 Press Spacebar. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Sub-Discipline. 17 Move the cursor up. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design the active view.Fire Protection Plan . enter 2135. for View Name. 19 Make Level 2 . and then click Modify. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Design ➤ FP . select FP . For Default View Template.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select MEP Section. and click Draw Pipe.Design. Click OK. 13 Select the elbow fitting.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select Design. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 12 If necessary. and press Enter. Under Identity Data.

25 Verify that Fire Protection . for Diameter. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select .23 In the section view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.

rfa. click Yes to load a family. verify that M_Gate Valve . and click Open. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 31 In the alert dialog. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 33 In the Type Selector.29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50 mm is selected.

click Training Files. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .35 Open 3D Fire Protection.rvt. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.

Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 6 In the Filter dialog. width. Changing the diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 .NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. click Check None. or height. height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 7 On the Options Bar. width. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). and click OK. or width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Diameter. select 25mm. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 8 Click Modify. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP.

click to place the tag. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 12 If necessary. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . . 18 In the 3D view. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and after each segment highlights. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Press Esc. By hiding the linked file. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. select the linked architectural file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view.rfa. 17 On the View Control Bar. Clear Leader. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. and click Open.

and when the section highlights. 21 On the Options Bar.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. The main piping is selected and displays in red. press Tab. select 100mm. for Diameter. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .

Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. select 40mm.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. as shown. and maximize the floor plan. and then tag the piping as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. The pipe diameter is modified. 25 On the Options Bar.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this tutorial. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

304 .

create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

and click OK. dependent views. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and view references. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. and click Properties. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Floor Plans. matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Close the file without saving. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 9 Click OK. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. create dependent views for areas B and C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 10 In the drawing area. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Apply Default View Template. and then press Esc. 4 Using the same method. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click OK. and click OK. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 2 Right-click the dependent view title.rvt. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. more focused. views and put them on the sheet. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Rename. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale.

click the current value. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . In the Color dialog. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and then press Esc. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. select 11. For Line Pattern. Click OK. select black. select Double Dash . 19 In the drawing area. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references.

and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. on the Options Bar. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view.20 Select the upper view reference and. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. as shown. 21 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Properties.rvt. for View Name. 4 In the Project Browser. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . enter Plumbing Isometric . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.Domestic Water. and zoom to each of the view references. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 2 Zoom in. and select the section box.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plumbing Isometric. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click 3D Plumbing.

7 Select the WSHPs in the view. The section crop lines no longer display. Click Apply. and click to select it. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select 3. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 10 Right-click. for View Classification. and then click OK. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. select Dash.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Documentation. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. For Sub-Discipline. Click OK.

13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Right-click. and click to select it.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. 19 Using methods learned previously. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. verify that Common is selected. select 1.Sanitary Waste. click on the Format value. and in the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and in the view properties. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Isometric. On the View Control Bar.5mm Arial. specify Plumbing . For Slope.16 Press Esc. and for Default View Template.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 26 Press Esc twice. for Rounding.■ In the Format dialog. select To the nearest 10. and then place the callout view on a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When the view is associated with a sheet. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 22 Click OK twice. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. click Training Files.rvt.

and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Creating Callout Views | 317 . for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). select 1 : 50. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. under Sheets (all). select 5. double-click M601 . Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method. Click OK. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Line Weight. and select the viewport. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. Creating Callout Views | 319 . Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. For Title on Sheet. Click OK.

19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. enter Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names. and click OK.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

322 .

rvt. Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. and annotation to create a legend. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 323 . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. linetypes. work with model-based components. click Training Files.

and select 1. 9 Press Esc twice. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 8 With the text still selected. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a segment of round duct. 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 325 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. and then click Right Straight.

you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 20 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 25 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog.17 Click Modify. click Load. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Load Family dialog.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. 24 On the Options Bar. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. and click Open. under Category. If necessary. for Ducts. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.rfa.

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Creating Annotations | 327 . 32 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.26 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. as shown. for Leader. 36 Press Esc twice. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. select Free End.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. That’s because you changed a type property. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 37 In the drawing area. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. lay out. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 40 Using the method learned previously.rvt. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. and lock lighting fixtures. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions | 329 . Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. not simply an instance property. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 12 Click EQ. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 14 Using the same method.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. select the dimension line. On the Options Bar.

and offset them from the wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. click Training Files. Because the dimensions are locked. 20 Using the same methods. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. annotation symbols. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and notes. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Creating a Legend In this exercise.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. enter 2430. 17 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.9). Creating a Legend | 331 . you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.rvt. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. click the 3 interior locks on the line. linework.

5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . enter Diffuser Legend.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.200 Neck. ■ 9 In the drawing area. Click OK. select 1 : 50.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . For Scale. select Floor Plan. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For View. and select 1. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 10 Using the same method. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 333 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. The selected detail lines are now thin. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 26 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc.

and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . enter E. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Creating a Legend | 335 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Using the method learned previously.30 Select Spot Elevation .MECHANICAL LEGEND. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

and select Title w Line . 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. click Training Files.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A drafting view using detail components. detail groups. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A detail callout that references another view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. 337 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.113 East elevation view.rvt. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. and then modify and align the views.113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . place Power Riser . clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

and click OK. 12 Select the Level 1 line. for Title on Sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. and click Activate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Deactivate View.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select Title w Line .Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Press Esc. right-click. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and click Activate View. 21 Using the drag control. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Close the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.rvt. click Training Files. for Name. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. notice that there are no snaps active. for Line Weight. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. In the Line Styles dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .113 North view. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . In the New Subcategory dialog. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. as shown. expand Lines. verify that Chain is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. As you draw. enter Electrical Power. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. select 6. click New. and then click OK.

10 Press Esc. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. enter 3mm. for Offset. 11 Using the same method.

so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). select Multiple. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and select 1.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

Using the same method. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. click on the length dimension value. and press Enter. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 12. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You enter exact values for each line length. for Offset. Press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and then press Esc. 40 Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. you can ensure that they stay together.0. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . enter 3. enter 7.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. change the length of the bottom line to 3.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. for Name. 51 Using the method learned previously. and click OK. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 47 In the drawing area. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. 50 With the group selected. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 52 Select the detail group. while pressing Ctrl. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and then press Esc. 54 Select the group. 46 In the Project Browser. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). In later exercises. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. and click Rename. Back. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and click OK. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. click Home.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). click Training Files. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and then click the corner where the Top. select 3D Views. and Left sides converge. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. for Name. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 2 Zoom in to view the section.rvt. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 In the Rename View dialog. Walkthroughs. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 8 On the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 3 Select the section box. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 5 Right-click the copy. and click Apply View Template. 4 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Move the cursor down and to the left. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and click to specify the second leader point. Click OK. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Typical. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.■ ■ Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . select 3D HVAC Iso.

352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. 19 Complete the text labels. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.18 Press Esc.

30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click View Properties. scroll down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click OK. Place a detail component. clear Crop Region Visible. 32 In the Instance Properties. click Training Files. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and under Extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Right click the view. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click Deactivate View. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.25 Click OK. select Crop View and Section Box. and click Activate View. 33 Right-click the view. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

select Documentation. select 1 : 5.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. Click OK. as the rectangle start point. For Scale. for Sub-Discipline. select Plumbing. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 13 In the drawing area. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For View Classification. right-click the view name. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Element panel. and click Properties. click the point at the top of the drain. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.

Drafting Detail Components | 355 . select C. and then press Esc.I. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.P. for Type. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select 1. 21 In the drawing area. 18 With the filled region still selected. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click Modify. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

select Multiple. select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . (Line). 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 34 Press Esc. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 23 In the drawing area. 31 On the Options Bar. 28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.

and click OK. 49 Click Modify. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. for Name. select the Flashing Membrane group. as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle). draw wide detail lines as shown.D. 45 Using the method learned previously. press Tab to highlight the chain. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 61 Using the same method. press Spacebar twice. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.

81 Select the text note. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 76 To select the leader start point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. select 15000 (Division 15 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and then click OK. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 71 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 72 If necessary. 80 Press Esc twice.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.70 In the Keynotes dialog.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

open P103 . and then press Esc twice. and click to place it. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .